JP2020028351A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can prevent a performance from being inappropriate.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120, as a variable display performance, can execute a setting suggestion on the basis of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 or a ready-to-win notice on the basis of a pattern PT-8 or PT-9, and executes a setting suggestion (strong) at a higher ratio when the variable display performance is executed in a second period than when the variable display performance is executed in a first period, when the variable display performance can be executed in the first period and the second period during a variable display of a normal ready-to-win and a super ready-to-win.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  In some conventional gaming machines, the probability that a variable display result will be a big hit (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed by changing a set value (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-200902 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value according to the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. However, since no consideration is given to how to perform the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the plurality of times, the effect may be inappropriate. Was.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an effect from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of the means 1 is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) that can execute a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes;
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (low) based on the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4) for suggesting a setting, and a setting and a type suggested in the first suggestion mode. (E.g., setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to the pattern PT-7).
The predetermined effect execution means may execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed after the first number of the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of the plurality of times. The predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and FIGS. 8-28 to 8). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach as the second and third embodiments, Acceptable in the first period Portions for performing a high proportion of the setting suggested (strong) who when performing variable display in effect at even second period than when performing an effect displayed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is maintained. Can be.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute the predetermined effect at the first number of times and to execute the predetermined effect at the second number of times, and to execute the specific effect including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. The predetermined effect of the mode can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, and (A part in which the setting suggestion based on any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the specific mode regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed in the first number or the second number.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 that is a special pattern) that indicates that the state is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period later than the first period than the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period. (A part where the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 which is the special pattern is executed at a higher rate.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the rate at which the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed increases as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, so that a sense of expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol change process to execute a special symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. The CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing to execute the variable display of the decoration symbol),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period which are the previous period)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the chance of providing the special effect or the specific effect of the specific mode in one variable display increases, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol change process to execute a special symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. The CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing to execute the variable display of the decoration symbol),
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display (target change) based on a hold storage targeted for a prefetch notice. A part that executes a reach announcement or setting suggestion as a look-ahead announcement for target fluctuations over multiple variable displays until it is started)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the setting specific mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, so that interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that indicates the control in the advantageous state and also indicates the setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a reach notice and a setting suggestion are provided). When both can be executed, a specific image suggesting both the jackpot and the maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, the paraglider in which the character appears while displaying the paraglider image Z1 moves) Image))
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the predetermined effect in the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed can be effectively increased, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. It is an explanatory view showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern for outliers. It is an explanatory view showing a receiving command buffer at the time of a moving winning. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A)-(C) is a figure which shows the flow of an effect during variable display. (A) is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8, (B) is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of an effect determination process during variable display as Modification Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach announcement and setting suggestion when an effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a figure which shows the production | presentation period of the production | presentation during variable display as Example 2, (B) is a figure which shows the production | presentation execution determination table during presentation in variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the reach determination in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion, and (B) is a diagram showing the fluctuation pattern set at the super reach. It is a figure which shows the reach decision and the execution decision ratio of a setting suggestion in a 1st period and a 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the reach determination in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 and the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the variation pattern in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reach announcement in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach, and the execution determination ratio of a setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing a change pattern of the execution of the advance notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 with the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) shows the variation pattern. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing the reach determination and the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a reach announcement and a setting suggestion execution ratio of setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when a fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation period of the production | presentation during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing a reach announcement and a setting suggestion execution determination ratio in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 common to all the variation patterns in the modification example 2, and (B) shows a variation pattern having a normal reach / super reach. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing reach notification and setting suggestion execution determination ratios in the second period for the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of reach announcement and setting suggestion in three periods.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (a non-normal symbol) other than the symbol per normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes “non-normal symbol”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “missing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to excite the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described later. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "non-reach loss"). When the display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, and then, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination (“reach ) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol will be "reach lost").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By executing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, various tables and the like referred to when making various determinations to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or a big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a missing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random number value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol fluctuation processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “out of place”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “missing”, the time is controlled to the time saving state or the probable change state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the gaming state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits is a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether a command for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11 or the like. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects control such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, if the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game was “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit gaming state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the gaming media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine (for example, a big bonus) capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about feature portion 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, a portion described as “step S1” is abbreviated as “S1” or “103SGS1”, “normal reach” is abbreviated as “N reach”, “Super reach” may be abbreviated as “S reach” or “SP reach”. In addition, components having the same functions as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description but having different forms and arrangement positions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be described as a reference. In addition, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing a player who plays a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

  First, FIG. 8A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge) constituting a gaming board surface. Board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device and is hit into the game area. Further, the gaming machine frame 103SG003 has a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position for closing the front surface. The game area is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a. When the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk or the like of the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

  The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which game balls relatively weakly hit (left hit) by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 flow down, and the right game area 103SG002R is a left game area 103SG002L by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball hit more strongly (right-handed) than a game ball flowing down through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 flows down.

  In the left gaming area 103SG002L, the general winning opening 10 is arranged, and in the right gaming area 103SG002R, from the upstream to the downstream of the right gaming area 103SG002R, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the like. The winning opening 10 and the special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, a game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and a game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R is variable. The second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won, and can pass through the passage gate 41.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, game balls flowing down the left gaming area 103SG002L cannot enter the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening, and gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. The main board 11 has a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a set value change state in which the set value can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an opening sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the clerk of the game hall or the like can check the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value check state). ).

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting switch 103SG052. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that the operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

  Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the game machine with the gaming machine frame 103SG003 closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 by using it. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade, so that only a store clerk having the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation described later with a setting key. Note that, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as being separate keys, but these may be shared by one key.

  In addition, a display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is disposed on the front of the board case 103SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is A first special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of performing variable display of one special figure, a second special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of performing variable display of second special figure, and a first reserved display capable of displaying a first reserved storage number. Device 103SG025A, a second hold display device 103SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, an ordinary symbol display device 103SG020 capable of executing a variable display of the ordinary symbol, a general-purpose reservation display device 103SG025C capable of displaying the general-purpose reserved storage number, A round indicator 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, a high base state (time saving state) and a big hit game A right-handed lamp 103SG132 which is lit in a gaming state in which a game ball in a state or the like is launched toward the right gaming area 103SG002R, a probable changing lamp 103SG133 which is lit in a probable state, and a time-saving lamp 103SG134 which is lit in a high base state (time-saving state). The game information display unit 103SG200 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are each composed of eight segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed in a common combination. ing.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two types of big hit symbols (lighted LED combinations) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two types of big hit symbols (lighted LED combinations) for each big hit type. Result and derived display are available.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B all have different jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. The big hit symbol derivable and displayable by the above and the big hit symbol derivable and displayable by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may at least partially overlap.

  Each of the first reservation display 103SG025A and the second reservation display 103SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold display 103SG025A and the second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of storages to be held is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of storages to be held increases, the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the hold storage. The light goes out toward the left (in the section 103SG).

  In the feature section 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation storage is executed with priority. It is like. For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the left end LED of the first reservation display 103SG025A is lit and the second reservation In the case where the left two LEDs of the display 103SG25B are lit), the variable display based on the second special figure hold storage causes the second special figure hold storage to become zero, and then the first special figure hold The variable display based on the memory is executed.

  The round display 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, there are provided three jackpot types, a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 5-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. In addition, which of the segments constituting the round display 103SG131 is turned on differs depending on the type of the big hit.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  The effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display and the like. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 that can detect that one movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and a second movable body 103SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. Is connected to an origin detection sensor 103SG332 that can detect that.

  FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. . The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “out”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the result of the big hit type determination. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the generated error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to be generated on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has been established. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B has been established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 8E is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-6 shows a variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “outside”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively, A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Note that a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “outside” and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern”), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “outside” and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out-of-reach variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in a variation variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “loss”. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β It is set shorter than. Further, the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in the present embodiment is executed is described in the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed. The special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variable display result is set so that the big hit expectation degree becomes “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these variation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number for pattern type determination, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variation contents (effect contents) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation patterns are the same. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern is out of the normal reach, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous production is performed. When the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach, a variation pattern that performs pseudo continuous production three times and becomes super-reach may be used.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8A, a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8A and the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. A variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a winning rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is the largest value 6 which is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the value which is more advantageous for the game arcade side as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 Become.

  FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B are explanatory diagrams illustrating the display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table uses a separate display result determination table for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the set value is 1 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 10210 to 1237 are assigned to “big hit”, and 32767 to 33094 are set to “small hit”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. When the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 102 to 1346 are assigned to “big hits”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hits”, and Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 10210 to 1237 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33421 are set to “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. When the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 102 to 1346 are assigned to “big hit”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”, and Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the set value is 2 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 10210 to 1253 are assigned to “big hit”, and 32767 to 33094 are set to “small hit”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. When the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 102 to 1383 are assigned to “big hit”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , And among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 10210 to 1253 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33421 are “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. In addition, when the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, from 102 to 1383 are assigned to “big hit”, and from 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”. Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 10210 to 1272 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. When the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1021 to 1429 are assigned to “big hit”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , And among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 10210 to 1272 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33421 are set to “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. In addition, when the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, from 10210 to 1429 are assigned to “big hit”, and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”. Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the set value is 4 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 10210 to 1292 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. When the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 102 to 1487 are assigned to “big hits”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hits”, and Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, values from 1020 to 1292 are assigned to “big hits”, and values from 32767 to 33421 are “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. When the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 102 to 1487 are assigned to “big hit”, 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”. Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the set value is 5 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 10210 to 1317 are assigned to “big hit”, and 32767 to 33094 are set to “small hit”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. When the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 102 to 1556 are assigned to “big hit”, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. , And among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 10210 to 1317 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33421 are set to “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. Also, when the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, from 1020 to 1556 are assigned to “big hit”, and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”. Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the set value is 6 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 10210 to 1346 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33094 are set to “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. In the case where the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, from 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", and from 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". Is assigned to “outside”.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 is set. , And among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 10210 to 1346 are assigned to “big hits”, and 32767 to 33421 are set to “small hits”. The other numbers are assigned to “out”. In addition, when the gaming state is the probable change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, from 1020 to 1674 are assigned to “big hit”, and from 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”. Is assigned to “outside”.

  As described above, in each of the display result determination tables, when the gaming state is in the probable change state (high-precision state), a larger number of determination values than in the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) are set to “ It is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and (1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, and 1/200 when the setting value is 6) Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, and 1/180 when the setting value is 3). 160, 1/140 when setting value is 4, setting If it is 5 1/120, 1/100 in the case of setting value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-precision state), it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is determined, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probable change state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state differs according to each set value (for example, If the value is 1, the multiplication of the jackpot probability in the probability change state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability change state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That the magnification of the jackpot probability all constant (e.g., 5 times) may be set to.

  Further, in each first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and controlled to the small hit game state is the same value regardless of the game state and the set value. The determination values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8A, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set to “small hit” regardless of the game state and the set value. The probability determined to control the game state is set to 1/200.

  On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and controlled to the small hitting game state regardless of the game state or the set value is the first special figure. The determination values are assigned so as to have the same value different from the diagram display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set to “small hit” regardless of the game state and the set value. The probability determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and the probability of being determined to be in the small hit game state regardless of the set value is the same probability is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the special figure display result to “small hitting” may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the special figure display result to “small hit” in accordance with the fluctuation special figure is different, is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hitting game state by setting the special figure display result to “small hit” regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same probability.

  Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to “big hit” or “small hit” in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to a common numerical range of the big hit determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

  When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot is set (the range from 1024 to 1237 is assigned to “big hit”), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to continue from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , Set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

  That is, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit determination values that can be taken, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the “big hit”, while if the set value is 2 or more, The numerical value within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical value range to the numerical value range is assigned to “big hit”. Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that continues to the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the big hit determination value. Go.

  In the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. Are set in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Here, paying attention to the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, The hit determination value is 32767 to 33094 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  Next, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the probable change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the big hit determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. Are set to the common numeric range.

  When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot is set (the range from 102 to 1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to continue from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

  That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the probable change state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535. While only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) among the hit determination values are assigned to “big hit”, if the set value is 2 or more, the large hit determination value is set to the common numerical value range. The numerical value in the range including the non-common numerical value range is assigned to "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that continues to the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the big hit determination value. Go.

  In the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the probable change state, the hit determination value is the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical value range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, paying attention to the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, among the hit judgment values from 102 to 1675 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 in a numerical range different from the big hit judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit determination value for determining a big hit regardless of the set value. Are set to the common numeric range.

  When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot is set (the range from 1024 to 1237 is assigned to “big hit”), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to continue from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , Set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

  That is, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit determination values that can be taken, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the “big hit”, while if the set value is 2 or more, The numerical value within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical value range to the numerical value range is assigned to “big hit”. Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that continues to the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the big hit determination value. Go.

  In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. Are set in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Here, paying attention to the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, The hit determination value is set to 32767 to 33421 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), using 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  Next, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the probable change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the big hit determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. Are set to the common numeric range.

  When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot is set (the range from 102 to 1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to continue from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

  In other words, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 in the case where the gaming state is the probable change state, when the set value is 1, a possible value in the range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Of the judgment values, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to “big hits”, but if the set value is 2 or more, the large hitting judgment values are not included in the common numerical value range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to “big hits”. Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that continues to the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the big hit determination value. Go.

  In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the probable change state, the hit determination value is the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range of 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, paying attention to the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, among the hit judgment values from 102 to 1675 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, The hit determination value is set to 32767 to 33421, using 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, the common numerical value range or the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range The determination value included in the continuous one numerical range consisting of the following is set as the large hit determination value numerical range, and the continuous one numerical value range based on the hit determination value 32767 regardless of the gaming state and the set value (common) The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

  Further, in each of these display result determination tables, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of the determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is smaller). The same). Also, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map (the small special judgment display value judgment table in the first special figure display result judgment table). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is 655, which is about On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special map display result is set to the "big hit" and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. The determination value is assigned so that the lower the value, the greater the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be the "big hit" and control to the big hit game state will be higher (big hit probability: set value 6> set value 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol has a big hit (big hit). A to big hit C). If MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, and to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means to determine whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the big hit type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table in the case of doing. In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table in case.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hits A to C based on the random number (MR2) for hit type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is a table referred to in order to determine

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable big hit) in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability high-base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a large-variable big hit) which shifts to the high-precision high-base state is set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by “big hit A” is executed by executing a special number of special figure games (100 times in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment) or by executing the special number of special times game. The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-precision control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continued until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of big hits A to big hits C are provided as big hit types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may provide below kind, or four or more kinds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the big hit B. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 is assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is finished. Of the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2,. The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the big hit B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 159 is assigned to the big hit B. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the big hit B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, in the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the big hit B. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to the big hit B).

  As described above, when the big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is finished. Of the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2,. The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for jackpot type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger the probability of a big hit, and the bigger the big hit C as the big hit type is easily determined). Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the big hit probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the gaming property itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a gaming property in which the probability loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 during the big hit game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to the certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during the high base (during the time reduction control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gaming characteristics are the same, but the big hit probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high while the number of prize balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). .

  Furthermore, when changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (the game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  More specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a large hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result should be "big hit", and the variable display result should be "small hit". A variation pattern determination table for a jackpot used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for a loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is to be “losing” are prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is the jackpot A ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined value within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the large hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, one of the MR1 determination value ranges 1 to 997 To 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per β big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 380 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 381 to 835 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 361 to 820 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 821 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 340 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 341 to 805 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is “5”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and to 321 to 790. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “6”, out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and up to 301 to 775. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 776 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, out of the range of the determination value 1 to 997 of MR3, , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 551 to 997 are assigned to It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 181 to 510 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation patterns 511 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 161 to 470 are determined. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 141 to 430 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and 431 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 121 to 390 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of 391 to 997 is allocated to the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “6”, 1 to 100 out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 101 to 350 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. Higher and higher in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. The ratio is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is determined. Assigned as. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8C, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. The variation pattern of the small hit may be determined at a different ratio from the plurality of variation patterns with the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table for outliers includes a variation pattern determination table for outliers used when the number of stored games is one or less in the low base state in which the time saving control is not performed in the gaming state, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and deviation variation used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach variation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α variation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the variation pattern determination table for outliers A (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Out of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 390 are allocated to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3).

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for outliers, the shortened nonreach outlier variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern of the reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation (PA2-3) in the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), if the set value is “1” in the outlier variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-medium combined pending storages), the determination value of MR3 Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3).

  In the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and the shortened non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the total pending storage number of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern of the reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation (PA2-3) in the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the outlier variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low-medium combined pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3).

  Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach α deviation deviation pattern corresponding to the shortened non-reach deviation during the time saving control. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 8D, when the set value is “1” in the outlier variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), the determination value range of MR3 is 1 to 997. Non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4) are allocated to non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), and normal-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1) are allocated to non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1). α is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-4) and 531 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) of the normal reach deviation, 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation. (PA2-3).

  As described above, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super-reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Are set to be lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In addition, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 out of the determination values is a superreach α deviation variation pattern, and the evaluation values of 901 to 997 are superreach β deviations regardless of the variation pattern determination tables. If the variable display result is not assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns, that is, the super-reach fluctuation pattern is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the super-reach fluctuation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation as the variation pattern for deviation are completely the same between each set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation are different between each set value. May differ by a small difference (for example, about 1%).

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of order, the mode in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display result is out of the range, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach are the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a deviation, the determination ratio of the super-reach α deviation variation pattern and the super reach β are the deviation of the deviation variation pattern regardless of the set value. Although the form in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be the same regardless of the set value in which only one of the determination ratio of the deviation variation pattern and the super reach β is determined.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out-of-position, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the super-reach α out-of-variation pattern and the super-reach β are the out-of-position fluctuation patterns. Although an example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of order, an example is given in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the non-reach or the normal reach is different depending on the set value. Depending on the set value that is set, there may be one or more variation patterns that are not determined among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach out of the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the outlier variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the variation pattern of the non-reach out-of-reach variation with a short variation time is determined, so that the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit of four. When the number of pending memories is reduced, non-reach fluctuations with a long fluctuation time are not achieved if the number of pending memories is reduced. When the pattern (PA1-1) is determined, the time of the variable display becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing due to the non-execution of the variable display.

  Further, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for a loss according to the number of stored special symbols and the variable display of the second special symbol when executing variable display of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for out-of-position of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value from 1 to 6, the variation in super-reach out-of-reach is obtained. The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the miss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the super reach miss variation pattern (the super reach miss The variation pattern appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the ratio in which the variable display is executed in the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern varies according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the miss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be executed in a variation pattern of.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the form of the reach effect is determined for each of the determined variation patterns, and the form of the reach effect is correlated one-to-one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc. You may decide by lottery.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8A may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 on the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As illustrated in FIG. 8A, the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display unit 103SG029A, a second display unit 103SG029B, a third display unit 103SG029C, and a fourth display unit 103SG029D. Each of the first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E is made up of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display unit 103SG029A to fifth display unit 103SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

  Note that the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is executed by using a non-test target area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is tested. .

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 103SG029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L which is a (real-time value during measurement), Base 1 which is a base value calculated in a normal state (low-probability low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every second 6000 balls, and normal state (low-probability low-base state) for every third 6000 balls in all game states And the base value 3, which is the base value calculated in step (1), can be displayed. The base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 in percentage.

  When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b." Is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L.L." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B to display "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, “b.” Is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B to display “b1.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b." Is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B to display "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b." Is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D.

  In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed by control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes a control of switching the display on the display monitor 103SG029 at an interval of 5 seconds in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3. It should be noted that the display of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 has a different display color according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is When “2”, each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “3”, each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “ In the case of "5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6". Displays the base value in the display monitor 103SG029 at purple. For this reason, the clerk at the amusement arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, a game control main process in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (103SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). When the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or when the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and when the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

  If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value changing process described later was being executed before the power interruption (that the power interruption occurred during the execution of the set value changing process) is set. Is determined (103SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the set value changing flag is not set, a RAM clear flag indicating that a RAM clear process described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

  If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), 103SGSa010 is not executed without executing 103SGSa010. move on.

  In 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started while the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (103SGSa013a).

  If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the CPU executes a set value change process (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, proceeds to 103SGSa013d, and proceeds to 103SGSa013d. Is not set (103SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

  In the setting value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, each time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the display monitor 103SG029 updates the setting value. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 has been turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. A command is output to effect control CPU 120.

  In the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 has been turned off.

  If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF in the 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the release sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to the 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of the 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

  In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time (to execute the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009)) (step 103). 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa014 after executing the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), and if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e). Do not execute, and proceed to 103SGSa014.

  In the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting “00H” to all addresses except for the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It clears the contents of all addresses except dresses that are in use.

  In 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is set to stop power supply (power interruption). A recovery process is performed to return to the state (103SGSa015).

  In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in a state before the power interruption, transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

  In 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a formal procedure by an operation of an amusement park employee or the like (the pachinko gaming machine is opened while the clear switch is operated with the gaming machine frame 103SG003 opened and the lock switch 103SG051 turned on). When the device 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (103SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processing of 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above is executed.

  When the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and when the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

  Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start and transmits a command at the time of recovery including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGSa023), and the start of the cold start notification is started by starting the blinking of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103 SGSa024).

  After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has expired (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not out of the timer (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed. Stops blinking (103SGSa027), and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

  In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are turned on and off during the cold start notification timer period (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

  Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and instructs the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The register of the built-in CTC is set (103SGSa029), and an interrupt is permitted (103SGSa030). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Further, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends an instruction to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the fact that the CPU 103 has returned from a power interruption during setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by one (103SGSa033), and determines whether the error notification execution waiting timer has expired (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution wait timer has not expired (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed. If the error notification execution wait timer has expired (103SGSa034; Y), the set value error occurs. The first display unit 103SG029A, the second display unit 103SG029B, the third display unit 103SG029C, and the fourth display unit 103SG029D included in the display monitor 103SG029 are provided as notification (error notification) that the display monitor 103SG029 is recovered from the occurrence of power failure and power interruption during setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the items (103SGSa035).

  Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and plays the game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a site management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of the 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until the power interruption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by an operation of a game clerk or the like), and thereby the display monitor 103SG029. The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B perform error notification.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment displays the display monitor 103SG029, The error notification is executed by the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It is possible to recognize that it has recovered from the power interruption during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the return from the power interruption during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the gaming arcade, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

  In the game control main process of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-13, when the clear switch is determined to be ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 103SGSa021. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Is not the case where the clear switch is determined to be ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the case where it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014, not after clearing the set value changing flag in 103SGSa021 (10 SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

  FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, first, effect CPU 120 determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). If the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags which are additionally stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  More specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-1” of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-0”. Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-3” of the special map reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-2”. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-4” of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-3”.

  If the first change start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second change start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second change start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second change start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the prize receiving command buffer (not shown) are represented by one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (103SGS274). Note that the contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because there is no destination to shift, so that the contents cannot be shifted.

  More specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-1” of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-0”. Then, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-2” of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-1”. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-3” of the special map reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-2”. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-4” of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-3”.

  After the execution of 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

  Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores data indicating the determined decorative symbol stop symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. I do.

  In this characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, that three symbols are even symbols as stop symbols. A combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) aligned with the symbols is determined. In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, as the stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd-number symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, (A combination of decorative symbols such as "333", "555", and "999"). In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probable variable big hit C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which three symbols are aligned with “7” as stop symbols is used. decide. When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probable variable big hit C, the stop symbols of "334" and "778" which are the same chance as the small hit are used as the stop symbols. Decide from inside. When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols “334” and “778” which have the same chance as the probability change big hit C are used as stop symbols. Decide from inside. If the received variable display result designating command is the first variable display result designating command corresponding to a loss, the variable design result designating command is a decorative design in which three designs are irregular as the stop design, (Losing symbol) is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, a stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect determination process shown in FIGS. 8 to 15 and determines whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Direction during variable display)
The effect during the variable display is, as an effect result, an advantageous state suggestion result indicating that the big hit game state is controlled, and a setting suggestion result indicating the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value changing process. (Predetermined effect). In the present characteristic portion 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) that suggests a possibility that the variable display mode becomes a reach and a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. is there. As an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, a setting suggestion indicating which of the set values is set values 1 to 6 can be executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display when the effect result can be any of the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, that is, both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed. When possible, the reach announcement in which the effect result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed prior to the setting suggestion in which the effect result becomes the setting suggestion result.

  As shown in FIG. 8-16, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display. When the execution is determined, the effect during variable display is executed based on which of the effect patterns among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, which effect mode among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9. It is determined by lottery whether to perform the effect during variable display based on.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to (C), the effect during the variable display starts at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the symbol (timing before the variable display mode reaches the reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 indicating the paraglider on which the passenger is riding fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. Further, while the plurality of images Z1 are moving to the right, an image Z2 indicating that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped may be displayed. Depending on the number of the dropped paragliders, a set value may be displayed. Or reach is suggested.

  Specifically, in the case of the pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of the pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of the pattern PT-3, three bodies break. In the case of pattern PT-4, four bodies break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, five bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, six bodies break and fall. In the case of the pattern PT-7, seven bodies are broken and fall, and in the case of the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, eight bodies are broken and fall.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-19 (A), the patterns PT-1 to PT-8 have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-8 have the same timing. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed at the same time (or a predetermined number may be destroyed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as the pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at a second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. .

  The effect period of the effect during the variable display is performed based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which setting suggestion is made, an effect in a common mode (for example, an effect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area) Is performed, and an effect in a non-common mode in which it is possible to specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device). 5, a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving to a position below the display area 5 is executed.

  In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effects during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed smaller than usual. The small symbol may be variably displayed at a predetermined location. In the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of destruction of the paraglider is 1 to 7. 6, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, each of which is a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion that indicates which of the paragliders is to be set, and in which the number of paragliders to be destroyed is eight, This is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach announcement indicating the possibility of reaching. In other words, the effect during variable display has the same effect in the common effect period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the effect condition (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period. If it is destroyed, the setting is suggested, and if eight are destroyed, the reach is announced.

  Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 indicate that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 indicate that the set value is an even number. (For example, 2, 4, 6), and the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or more than the odd-numbered intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT- 6 indicates that the set value may be equal to or more than the even-numbered intermediate setting (for example, 4 or 6), and the pattern PT-7 indicates that the set value may be the highest setting (for example, 6). .

  Then, for the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), the pattern is determined at a high ratio, so that any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is obtained. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} having a low degree of expectation of the pattern PT-5 is set to one of 5, 6 for the patterns PT-5 to PT-6. In this case, by being determined at a high rate, the second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} having a high degree of expectation of setting values 5 and 6 is set.

  In the characteristic section 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 will be described as low settings, and the setting values 5 and 6 will be described as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 to the low setting, setting the setting values 3 and 4 to the intermediate setting, and setting the setting values 5 and 6 to the high setting.

  On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 indicates that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

  The pattern PT-8 is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol is the normal reach, so that the first special pattern @reach announcement (low) and the first special pattern with low expectation of becoming the super reach are low. The pattern PT-9 is determined at a high ratio when the variable display mode of the symbol is the super reach, so that the second special pattern {reach} having a high degree of expectation of the super reach is provided. Notice (High), the second special mode II.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 provides the special mode (for example, the pattern PT-8 and PT-9) that indicates that the game is controlled to the big hit game state and the specific mode (for example, the pattern PT-) that indicates the setting. 1 to PT-7), it is possible to perform a variable display effect based on any of a plurality of effect modes including a reach notice (a predetermined effect in a special mode) based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9. When any of the setting suggestions (predetermined effects in a specific mode) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach announcement can be executed prior to the setting suggestion.

  In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the variable pattern is normal reach or super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is unsuccessful than at the time of the big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the big hit expectation degree is While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when the variable display result is a big hit. , Super-reach, that is, a pattern in which the jackpot expectation degree is higher than the pattern PT-8.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the effect during the variable display, the form in which the number of paragliders destroyed indicates the possibility of a big hit or which setting value is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. The appearance of a big hit or a high setting may be indicated by the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, eight) or more paragliders without breaking the paraglider. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to indicate which setting value is set, the production mode can be variously changed, for example, the number of appearances of a character, the type of a character that appears, and the like. What can suggest a big hit or a set value may be used.

  In the setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9, the last paraglider of the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. When the player falls, a specific sound may be output or the game effect lamp 9 or the like may emit light, so that it is possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

  As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for specifying the variable display result (outlier, non-probable variable hit A, positive variable big hit B, positive variable big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. Can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the command. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command stored in the fluctuation pattern specification command storage area.

  Then, while extracting the reach announcement type determination random number, using the effect (reach announcement) type determination table A shown in FIG. In this case, a lottery for determining the type of the advance notice is performed (103SGS292).

  In the table A for effect (reach notice) type determination shown in FIG. Pieces of determination values are assigned, and 60 pieces of determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. In other words, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

  When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to the non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. I have. In other words, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

  When the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and no judgment values are assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, no win is made for the reach announcement.

  By setting the determination value in this manner, when the variation pattern is the normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than in the case other than the normal reach variation pattern, and when the variation pattern is the super reach, The pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than the case other than the super reach variation pattern.

  Therefore, when an effect based on the pattern PT-8 appears, the possibility of becoming a normal reach variation pattern is higher than the super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on the pattern PT-9 appears, the effect is more superimposed than the normal reach variation pattern. It is highly likely that this is a reach variation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach variation pattern, but is likely to be a normal reach, and is therefore set to a reach announcement (low) with a low jackpot expectation. The pattern PT-9 is a super reach variation pattern. Therefore, the reach prediction (high) pattern with a high jackpot expectation is set.

  Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing the presence / absence of the reach notice and performing the type lottery in the 103SGS292. (103SGS293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined prior to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Proceed to 103SGS304.

  If it is determined in 103SGS292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach announcement is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach announcement is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is reached (low). Based on the winning of｝, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, and using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not to perform the setting suggestion in the effect during variable display, A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

  In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17 (B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to the non-execution and 25 patterns are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Are determined, 10 determination values are allocated to the pattern PT-2, 25 determination values are allocated to the pattern PT-3, 5 determination values are allocated to the pattern PT-4, and Four judgment values are assigned to PT-5, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to the non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to the non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, Twenty determination values are assigned to pattern PT-3, five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-4, fifteen determination values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to the non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to the non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, ten judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and fifteen judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to the non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, Ten judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, ten judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

  By setting the determination values in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, which is an even number, the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are more likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Means that the pattern PT-5 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It is easier to do. In addition, only when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-7 may be won. Therefore, when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears, it is determined that the set value is 6.

  Therefore, when an effect based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders to be destroyed is four or less is likely to appear, the setting value is likely to be any one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. When an effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of performed characters is 5 or more is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 5 and 6. That is, the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are set to suggest a setting that is unlikely to be high (set value 5 or 6) (low), and the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to high (set value 5 or 6). The setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

  In the first embodiment, the reach announcement type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of determination values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each of the determination random numbers may be determined appropriately. Just fine. In addition, each determination random number counter for generating each of the determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated by a random number update process every time a timer is interrupted.

  Returning to FIG. 8-15, as a result of the lottery of the presence / absence of setting suggestion execution and the type in 103SGS296, any one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is returned. It is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved (103SGS297). When it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, when the non-execution of the reach announcement has been won in 103SGS293, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 has been selected. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been selected. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined prior to the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

  In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} did not win, that is, if no setting suggestion was performed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , 103SGS297, based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the fact that any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 has been won, it is determined whether or not the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in the 103SGS293. (103SGS300).

  When it is determined in 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} has been won, when the non-execution of the setting suggestion has been elected in 103SGS297, execution of the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is performed. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been elected in the 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the elected pattern PT-8 is determined. Execution is determined prior to setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

  If it is determined in the 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, it is determined whether any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. A determination is made (103SGS302), and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 has been won, execution of a setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. If none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 has been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach announcement and the setting suggestion has been won, the variable display is not performed and the variable display is not performed. The effect determination processing ends.

  In 103SGS304, the effect type (one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. Is set (103SGS305), indicating that has been determined, and the variable display effect determination processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display effect determination processing of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set in 103SGS278, that is, the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. In the processing, it is determined whether or not execution of any of the effects during the variable display of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

  If the variable display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, where the variable display effect start wait timer is set to the period until the variable display effect start (103SGS279), and the variable display effect execution is performed. The determination flag is cleared (103SGS280), and the process proceeds to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the variable display effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without passing through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

  In the characteristic section 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect performed from the start of the variable display effect is a period until the start of the variable display effect. The variable display effect is started based on the variable display effect, so that the period until the start time of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start wait timer. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect (not shown) indicating a precursor is performed before the timing at which the effect during variable display is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is changed to the timing of the effect during variable display. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during the variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

  In 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

  The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N). I have.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (image display as an effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 to cause the image display device 5 to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control such that a decorative pattern is variably displayed by a change pattern corresponding to a change pattern designation command on a one-to-one basis. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols into the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data into the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing a variable display (variation) of the decorative design. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect display process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when performing the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs the predetermined display before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode after starting the variable display. At the production timing, either the reach announcement or the setting suggestion can be executed as the production during the variable display. It is possible to execute (the effect of the special mode) in preference to the setting suggestion (the effect of the specific mode) in which the effect result becomes the setting suggestion result.

  More specifically, as shown in the variable display effect determination process of FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach announcement and determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion. Priority over

  In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach in the lottery of the reach announcement (103SGS294). The notice (high) is executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach, the execution of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is a rate of 60%. In order to win (provisional decision), even if a lottery for setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), setting suggestion based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in 103SGS297 (high ), The reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined in the 103SGS301, so that the reach announcement is executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

  The reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) indicating that a larger percentage of hit control is performed than the reach notice (low). If both the reach notice (high) based on the pattern -9 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- It is executed prior to setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is executed. The setting suggestion (high) based on the reach notification (low) based on the pattern PT-8 can be executed with higher priority (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest in the effect during the variable display from being lowered by excessively prioritizing the reach notice and restricting the execution of the setting suggestion.

  The setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that the setting is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any one of -5 to PT-7 and the reach announcement based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern is performed prior to the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach announcement based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, the pattern PT-8 is displayed. It is possible to execute the reach announcement (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the effect during the variable display from being reduced by excessively prioritizing the setting suggestion and restricting the execution of the reach announcement.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach announcement prior to the setting suggestion. Specifically, the reach announcement (high) is performed prior to the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed prior to the reach announcement (low), and the reach announcement (low) is suggested ( Low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set so as to satisfy the relationship of “reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)”.

  In the present feature unit 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during the variable display is an effect that is performed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach announcement indicates the possibility of the variable display result being a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It indicates which set value is not changed during the business period. In addition, it is not preferable for a game hall that setting suggestions appear frequently and a player can easily guess what the setting value is. Therefore, in the super reach variation pattern, when performing the variable display effect when the set value is high setting, it is preferable for the player to suggest any one, but the set value is suggested at another timing. On the other hand, the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, so it is preferable for the player that the reach announcement appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

  In addition, the effect during variable display is an effect that is performed only during the variable display period of the symbol based on the super reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern that has a higher jackpot expectation than the non-reach variation pattern. In such a case, the player's expectation of the jackpot is higher than in the case where the player does not reach the player. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach announcement especially in the case of the jackpot reach variation pattern, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot is reduced, and the effect becomes inappropriate. By causing the notice to be executed prior to the setting suggestion, it is possible to prevent the effect from being inappropriate.

  In the first embodiment, if the reach announcement is executed prior to the setting suggestion as the tendency of the effect during the variable display, for example, the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and the high reach In some situations, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set so that setting suggestions are executed prior to reach announcement.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery of the reach announcement and the lottery of the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery of the reach announcement is executed prior to (prior to) the lottery of the setting suggestion. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the reach announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the lottery of the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery of the reach announcement. , The order is arbitrary. If the number of determination values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the determination values are as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) and (B). It is not limited to those described.

  In the first embodiment, the form in which the setting suggestion indicating the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed is exemplified as the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of the displayed animal. When any execution with the setting suggestion effect is possible, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and a setting suggestion effect that sets a setting value when controlled to an advantageous state is executed. There was a problem that the production would be inappropriate. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect during variable display is one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7). That can execute a setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern) that indicates that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting mode. Specific mode (for example, setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode). ), The predetermined effect in the special mode can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect in the specific mode (for example, the CPU 120 for the effect control can perform the predetermined effect in FIG. In the variable display effect determination processing shown in FIG. 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery of the reach announcement, the execution of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 in preference to the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, the setting suggestion (high) based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won. If so, a part where the execution of the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in the 103SGS301 is determined prior to the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. The control CPU 120 determines the execution of the effect based on any one of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio having a relationship of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). (See FIG. 8-20 of Modification 1)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation where a predetermined effect in a specific mode is executed and the effect becomes inappropriate when the control is performed in the advantageous state.
More specifically, even when a variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit is performed, a setting suggestion that can be suggested even at a timing other than the variable display is performed prior to the reach announcement. In addition, it is not possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation of the big hit, thereby preventing inappropriate performance.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) indicating that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)) and
The predetermined effect execution means,
If both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, In the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery of the reach announcement, the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (103SGS294) based on the pattern PT-9 in 103SGS294. (H) is determined prior to setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the lottery for setting suggestion in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. (Part where execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined prior to reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the execution of the predetermined effect in the specific mode is excessively restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the interest in the predetermined effect from being reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) that indicates a setting of a setting value having a higher degree of advantage than the first specific mode. )) And
The predetermined effect execution means,
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, In the variable display effect determination processing shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, when any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the lottery for setting suggestion, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern PT in 103SGS298. -5, where execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of PT-7 is determined prior to reach announcement (low) based on pattern PT-8)
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, when the pattern PT-8 is won in the lottery of the reach announcement, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern PT-8 in the 103SGS301. (The part that determines the execution of the reach announcement (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode is excessively restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the interest in the predetermined effect from being reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The operation prompting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the operation prompting that prompts the player to perform the operation performs the operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31 </ b> B during the operation effective period of the push button 31 </ b> B. Executable part.) And
An operation detecting unit (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation of operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promoting notification by the operation notifying unit is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the operation detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B). When the specific operation to be performed is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part capable of performing an effect of changing to an image Z2 (destroying a paraglider and dropping it. Modified example)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the player who knows the specific operation can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific operation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period in which a common effect is performed irrespective of which of the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, in any one of reach notice or setting suggestion). Irrespective of whether the image Z1 is present or not, a common effect period in which an effect is performed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area), A non-common production period that can specify either the production or the predetermined production in the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify either a reach announcement or setting suggestion, that is, a number of images Z2 according to the production pattern) (A non-common effect period in which the effect of moving to a position below the display area of the image display device 5 is performed) (see FIGS. 8 to 18).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation regarding whether the predetermined effect in the special mode or the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. You can improve the interest.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode which is both a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and a suggestion of setting (for example, both reach announcement and setting suggestion can be executed). Sometimes, a specific image indicating both the jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which the paraglider in which the character appears while the image G1 of the paraglider is displayed) is displayed. Parts etc.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the predetermined effect in the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed can be effectively increased, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect in the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect in the specific mode) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion regarding the display result of one variable display. Various timings may be used as long as the timing is possible and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. In detail, if the reach announcement indicates the display result of the variable display, the reach announcement can be performed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold storage can be performed. If the display result is indicated, it is possible to execute the reach announcement at an arbitrary timing during a period spanning a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. . Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at an arbitrary timing during one business period.

  In addition, when both the reach announcement (predetermined effect in the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect in the specific mode) can be executed, it is determined that the reach announcement can be executed prior to the setting suggestion. The lottery is executed prior to the setting suggestion lottery, and the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is performed earlier than the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. And executing the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. The execution of the reach announcement at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach announcement is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, a case where the execution rate of the reach notice is 100%.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, a variable display effect performed when both reach notice and setting suggestion can be performed. As an example, the form in which the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed. The effect during variable display may include both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result as the effect result.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during the variable display has a common common production period for the reach announcement and the setting suggestion. A separate effect (without a corresponding period) may be provided (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, and the like). Then, even when the reach announcement and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the reach announcement may be executed prior to the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, a first modified example of the feature portion 103SG in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B are flowcharts illustrating a variable display effect determination process according to the first modification, and FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion.

  In the first embodiment, by performing the lottery of the presence / absence of the reach announcement and the type lottery prior to the presence / absence of the execution of the setting suggestion and the type lottery, the reach announcement is executed prior to the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach announcement and the setting suggestion lottery may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8A, in the effect determination processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, while extracting the effect type determination random number, using the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), whether or not to perform the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion), A lottery is performed to determine the type of the advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

  Although the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is not particularly shown, the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 are different depending on the type of the variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, respectively. However, the execution ratio of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, reach announcement is determined at a higher rate (priority) than setting suggestion, that is, setting is made so that the decision rate increases in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and no execution (E.g., the advance notice is determined at a rate of 50%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%).

  Also, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the ratio of the reach announcement (high) is higher than that of the reach announcement (low) (for example, the reach announcement (high) is 40%, and the reach announcement (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine When the set values are the high set values 5 and 6, the setting suggestion (high) is higher than the setting suggestion (low) (for example, the setting suggestion (high) is 35% and the setting suggestion (low) is 5%). %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). Execution may be determined.

  Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the form in which the execution ratio of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution ratio of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, at the time of a big hit, a higher priority should be given to the reach announcement than to the setting suggestion at the time of the loss. Is preferred.

  In the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach announcement or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although a possible form was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this.When both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is: It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that gives a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

  Note that, as the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big hit and the maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. Displays images that move the paraglider in which the paraglider appears), or images with paraglider display modes (eg, color, size, moving speed, orbit, etc.) different from the normal mode. The display may be performed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or the light-emitting body may emit light in a special light-emitting mode.

  Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach announcement or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach announcement or the setting suggestion in the variable display production, while the reach announcement and the setting suggestion are variable. Each of the effects may be independently executable at an effect timing different from the effect during display.

  Specifically, for example, a reach notice (for example, a notice of a character in which a character appears) in a mode different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 8 to 18 can be executed at an effect timing different from the effect during variable display. On the other hand, the setting suggestion (for example, the ending image of the jackpot) different from the setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 8 to 18 is performed at a timing (for example, after the end of the jackpot, etc.) different from the variable display production. It may be executable.

  In the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect during the variable display may be executable a plurality of times during the variable display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) as the second embodiment, the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. And an effect during variable display can be executed between and the second period after the first period.

  Since the non-reach or small hit variation pattern is short in the variable display time for performing the variable display effect twice or more, the execution target of the variable display effect is the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach in the second embodiment. However, non-reach or small hit variation patterns may be included as the execution target of the variable display effect.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination processing, the presence or absence of execution of the variable display effect is determined according to the variation pattern by using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the variable display effect execution determination table contains 40 random numbers out of 100 variable display effect execution determination random numbers. Are assigned to the execution of the effect during variable display, and 60 items are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display. Also, when the variation pattern is super reach, in the variable display effect execution determination table, 60 of the 100 random display effect execution determination random numbers are allocated to the execution of the variable display effect, and 40 Are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

  When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG.

  When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach or the super reach, the execution is performed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 8-22A and 8-22B. The setting suggestion and the reach announcement are determined at different rates for the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be performed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratio between the setting suggestion and the reach announcement is set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 23, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined to be performed when the variation pattern is the normal reach, the effect type (effect effect) of the variable display effect performed in the first period is determined. Pattern) is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% of the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation (high)). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is changed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and a pattern PT-8 or PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation) at a rate of 60% (High)).

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24, when attention is paid to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, during the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and the pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. One of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern PT-9 was reached at a rate of 5%. Notice (high) will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2% Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, and a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT-PT. -4 is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and 1.2% is determined as any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% is determined. Pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 2.2%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 55%. % Of the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT-PT. -4 is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%, and is determined at a rate of 35%. Pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 2.5%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 55%. % Of the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, and the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 35%. It is determined to be {reach notice (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3% Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, and a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT5 at a rate of 56.5%. -4 is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and 3.5% is determined as any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% is determined. Pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, One of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.5%, and a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 55%. % PT is determined as the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (high)) is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 35%. It is determined to be {reach notice (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6% Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, and a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8-25 and FIG. 8-26, when paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the pachinko game machine 1 is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be performed is determined to be any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and the pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is determined as {setting suggestion (high)}, the pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined at a rate of 15%, and the pattern PT-9 is reached at a rate of 25%. (High)｝ to be decided. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2% Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.2%, and is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 2.2%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 5%. % Of the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT8.5 at a rate of 58.5%. -4 is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%, and is determined at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 2.5%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 5%. % Of the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined at a rate of 2% {setting suggestion (high)}, and the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 15%. It is determined to be {reach notice (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3% Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT5 at a rate of 56.5%. -4 is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and 3.5% is determined as any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.5%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 5%. % Of the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Is determined as {setting suggestion (low)}, and one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 15%. It is determined to be {reach notice (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6% Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is reached as the effect type of the variable display effect performed in the second period. The ratio (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or the reach notice (high) 決定 is determined is the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 ｛reach as the effect type of the effect during the variable display performed in the first period. It is set higher than the ratio (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or the reach notice (high) is determined.

  Therefore, as the effect during the variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice which is an advantageous state suggestion result is easily executed, so that one game result, that is, at a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. The expectation of the big hit can be increased.

  In particular, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect type of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low). Alternatively, the ratio at which the setting suggestion (high) 決定 is determined is set higher than the ratio at which the execution of the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (low) or reach announcement (high)} is determined. For the effect type of the effect during variable display performed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined by the pattern Any of PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) is set higher than the determined ratio.

  In other words, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach announcement are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are set in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach announcement in the first period, and the reach announcement is executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion in the second period. .

  Therefore, for example, after the reach announcement (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach announcement (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, during the variable display. The variable display is performed by executing the reach announcement (so-called falling down) so that the expectation of the reach announcement decreases as the effect is repeatedly executed, or by executing the reach announcement (high) in the first time. Can be predicted before the reach announcement is executed twice, thereby lowering the player's expectation that the variable display is a super reach. That can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8 -26, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect performed in the first period. However, the ratio at which any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-8 (setting suggestion (high)) is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the effect during the variable display is executed, the effect during the variable display is more likely to be executed in the pattern PT-9. Therefore, the game for the effect during the variable display being executed in the pattern PT-5 to the pattern PT-8. Can maintain the expectation of the elderly.

  In the second embodiment, when it is determined that the effect during variable display is to be executed, the effect during variable display is executed twice in the first period and the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is determined that the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display may be executed three or more times. Note that, in the case where the effect during variable display is performed three times or more in this manner, the determination ratio of the effect type is set such that the pattern PT-9 is easily determined each time the effect during variable display is executed. The engineer's expectation may be maintained for a longer period of time.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect performed in the second period include the pattern PT- as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggesting (high)} are determined at different rates, so the variable display effect performed in the first period and the effect during the second period are performed. It is difficult to continuously perform the setting suggestion in the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the effect of setting suggestion being performed in both of these two variable display effects and the variable display effect being monotonous.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, in the variable display production performed in the first period and the variable display production performed in the second period, the pattern PT- 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined at different rates, so the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect performed in the second period are performed. It is difficult to continuously execute the reach announcement with the effect during variable display. In other words, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the monotonous effect of the variable display effect due to execution of the reach notice in these two variable display effects.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. Is executed, the form in which the reach announcement is executed at different rates as the effects during the variable display is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the effect during variable display is executed and the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the ratio at which the reach announcement is executed as the effect during variable display may be the same. By doing in this way, when the effect during variable display is executed between the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the effect during variable display during the first period and the second period. In the same way, the player can be expected.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the announcement effect during variable display is performed during the same period. Although the rate at which the execution of the reach announcement is determined as the variable display effect is illustrated as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect effect performed during the same period is not limited to this. The rate at which the execution of the reach announcement as the variable display effect is determined may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the ratio at which the reach announcement is performed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the middle production from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-22 to FIG. 8-26, when paying attention to the effect during the variable display performed in the first period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (patterns PT-1 to PT-1) The ratio (pattern for determining any execution of the pattern PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach announcement (pattern) The ratio of determining whether to execute the PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to the same ratio of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect performed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is determined by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, the same ratio is set to 40%, and the ratio for determining the reach announcement (the ratio for determining the execution of the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

  For this reason, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the variable display effect performed during the first period (the first variable display effect) is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the reach announcement is executed at a rate of 40%. In the variable display effect performed during the second period (the second variable display effect), the setting is always set at 40%. As the suggestion is executed and the reach announcement is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be similarly expected to execute the setting suggestion.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, so that the opportunity to provide the advance notice and the setting suggestion in one variable display is increased, thereby increasing the interest. .

  More specifically, when only the reach announcement can be independently executed in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, the ending of the big hit game state or the variable display). (When it is not being executed), it is possible to execute it alone. However, when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable point is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display effect in which both the reach announcement and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention, but also the present embodiment 2 As described above, by making it possible to execute the effect during variable display a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible not only to increase the chance of executing the setting suggestion, but also to perform the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach announcement in a well-balanced manner without obstructing the execution of the reach announcement even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during the variable display is determined, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and the non-execution in which neither the reach announcement nor the setting suggestion is executed may be determined in at least one of the first period and the second period.

  When the non-execution can be determined as described above, even if the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion can be different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following second invention. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of the displayed animal. When any execution with the setting suggestion effect is possible, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and a setting suggestion effect that sets a setting value when controlled to an advantageous state is executed. There was a problem that the production would be inappropriate. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as an effect during variable display). That can execute the setting suggestion based on the or the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern) that indicates that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting mode. Specific mode (for example, setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
When the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times, the predetermined effect execution means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, see FIG. As shown, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), in the second number after the first number of the plurality of times, when performing the predetermined effect in the first number of the plurality of times. The predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When performing the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 which is a special pattern, than when performing the variable display effect in the second period. Portions for performing the over switch announcement at a high rate)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect in the special mode is easily executed as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, so that the expectation of the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the variable display effect performed in the second period, the reach announcement is more easily performed than in the variable display effect performed in the first period. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation that the big hit game state will be controlled during the second period closer to the timing when the variable display ends than during the one period.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, can execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a lower rate than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the specific mode in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect in the first period more in the second period after the first period than in the case where the effect is performed during the variable display. (A part in which setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern, is executed at a lower rate when the effect during variable display is executed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is easily executed at a timing close to one game result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation of the advantageous state.
Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine the reach announcement at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means,
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode can be executed at a higher ratio than the predetermined effect in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. When the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display during the first period, the setting suggestion based on any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are the specific patterns, is given as the special pattern PT-. 8 or a portion that executes at a higher rate than the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9),
When the predetermined effect is performed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect in the special mode can be executed at a higher ratio than the predetermined effect in the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. When the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 which is the special pattern is set to the patterns PT-1 to PT-1 which are the specific patterns. Part that executes at a higher rate than setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect in the special mode is more easily executed, while the predetermined effect in the specific mode is harder to be executed. Expectation can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol change process to execute a special symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. The CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing to execute the variable display of the decoration symbol),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period which are the previous period)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the chance of providing the special effect or the specific effect of the specific mode in one variable display increases, so that the interest is improved.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 21, the embodiment in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect may be executable even during the reach effect.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol change process to execute a special symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. The CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing to execute the variable display of the decoration symbol),
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display (target change) based on a hold storage targeted for a prefetch notice. A part that executes a reach announcement or setting suggestion as a look-ahead announcement for target fluctuations over multiple variable displays until it is started)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the setting specific mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, so that interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that indicates the control in the advantageous state and also indicates the setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a reach notice and a setting suggestion are provided). When both can be executed, a specific image suggesting both the jackpot and the maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, the paraglider in which the character appears while displaying the paraglider image Z1 moves) Image))
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the predetermined effect in the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed can be effectively increased, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the third invention described below. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value by the type of animal displayed, for example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed multiple times However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is performed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate. . Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) that can execute a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes;
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (low) based on the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4) for suggesting a setting, and a setting and a type suggested in the first suggestion mode. (E.g., setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to the pattern PT-7).
The predetermined effect execution means may execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed after the first number of the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of the plurality of times. The predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and FIGS. 8-28 to 8). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach as the second and third embodiments, Acceptable in the first period Portions for performing a high proportion of the setting suggested (strong) who when performing variable display in effect at even second period than when performing an effect displayed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, so that the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is executed is maintained. Can be.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, in the variable display effect performed during the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) is set more than in the variable display effect performed during the first period. Is easily executed, the player's expectation that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a high set value such as 4 to 6 can be maintained.

  In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, indicates the odd setting or the even setting, and the first suggestion. A setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is a second suggestion mode in which a setting different from the setting suggested by the mode is suggested, is a mode suggesting a middle setting or more or a maximum setting. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be any type that suggests a setting different in type from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode. The setting value suggested in the mode and the setting value suggested in the second suggesting mode may be all different setting values (for example, the first suggesting mode indicates the setting value 1 and the second suggesting mode indicates the setting value). If it suggests a value of 6, When the suggestion mode suggests the odd set values 1, 3, and 5, and the second suggestion mode suggests the even settings 2, 4, and 6), the set value suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode suggest The common setting value may be included in both of the setting values (for example, the first suggesting mode suggests setting values 1 to 4 and the second suggesting mode suggests setting values 3 to 6 that are intermediate or higher). In some cases, one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode may be a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other may be a suggestion regarding a set value that has been set. That is, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting to be suggested when there are a plurality of setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. Includes those with different numbers or ranges of values, or those with different suggestions.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute the predetermined effect at the first number of times and to execute the predetermined effect at the second number of times, and to execute the specific effect including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. The predetermined effect of the mode can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, and (A part in which the setting suggestion based on any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the specific mode regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed in the first number or the second number.
Specifically, after making the execution ratio of the entire setting suggestion the same in the first period and the second period (or a ratio lower in the second period than in the first period), the effect during the variable display in the first period By performing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when performing the variable display during the second period than when executing the setting, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being executed excessively. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the high set value.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 that is a special pattern) that indicates that the state is controlled to the advantageous state,
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, compared to the case where the effect control is performed in the first period. In the case, a portion in which the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 which is a special pattern is executed at a higher rate)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the rate at which the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed increases, so that a sense of expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
In the second embodiment, if the execution ratio of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher ratio in the second period than in the first period. However, the reach announcement can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol change process to execute a special symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. The CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing to execute the variable display of the decoration symbol),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period which are the previous period)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the chance of providing the special effect or the specific effect of the specific mode in one variable display increases, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol change process to execute a special symbol variable display, and as shown in FIG. The CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing to execute the variable display of the decoration symbol),
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display (target change) based on a hold storage targeted for a prefetch notice. A part that executes a reach announcement or setting suggestion as a look-ahead announcement for target fluctuations over multiple variable displays until it is started)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the setting specific mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, so that interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that indicates the control in the advantageous state and also indicates the setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a reach notice and a setting suggestion are provided). When both can be executed, a specific image suggesting both the jackpot and the maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, the paraglider in which the character appears while displaying the paraglider image Z1 moves) Image))
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the predetermined effect in the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed can be effectively increased, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(4th invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following fourth invention. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value by the type of animal displayed, for example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed multiple times However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is performed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate. . Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect during variable display is one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7). That can execute a setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern) that indicates that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting mode. Specific mode (for example, setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means,
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started). part),
The predetermined effect of the specific mode is performed when the predetermined effect is performed at a first number of times of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is performed at a second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the variable display in the first period and after the first period. (A part where the setting suggestion based on any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is different from the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from being monotonous, because the first and second times have different eases of occurrence of the predetermined effect in the specific mode.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice in the first period, while the effect control CPU 120 determines the second period. In, by determining the setting suggestion execution as a variable display effect at a lower rate than the execution of the reach announcement, in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, not only the setting suggestion is difficult to be executed, Since the reach announcement is easily executed, the player's expectation of the big hit can be increased. In the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach announcement, while the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach announcement in the second period. .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same ratio between when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times ( For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 is used. Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode, regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the special mode is executed in the first number or the second number.
In the second embodiment, if the non-execution can be determined, it is possible to make the execution ratio of the reach announcement the same while making the execution ratio of the setting suggestion different between the first period and the second period.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different ratio between when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8 to 22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display during the first period, and during the variable display during the second period after the first period. The part where the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio when the effect is executed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode changes between the first number and the second number, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach announcement, while the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach announcement in the second period. In addition, in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, not only the setting suggestion is hardly performed, but also the reach announcement is easily performed, so that the player's expectation of the big hit can be increased.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set, and when the first effect is different from the first set value. When the second set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. When the effect during variable display is executed during the period, the portion that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 In the case where the effect during variable display is performed in the second period, a part of executing the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set and a second set value different from the first set value. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the predetermined effect is set. The setting is performed when the reach notification based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at a different rate in accordance with the set value that is set, and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period. A portion for executing the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value which is set)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from being monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following fifth invention. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value by the type of animal displayed, for example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed multiple times However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is performed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate. . Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of Means 1 of the fifth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect during variable display is one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7). That can execute a setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern) that indicates that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting mode. Specific mode (for example, setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means,
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started). part),
A plurality of times between when the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and when the second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values is set The predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at the same ratio at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the pachinko game is performed for the variable display effect executed in the first period). The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% irrespective of the set value set in the machine 1, and the effect during the variable display executed in the second period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The part that executes the suggestion at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of whether the first setting value or the second setting value is set. You can expect the same.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, even when any value of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is executed in the first period. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance situation) and the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed during the second period (appearance state) do not change. Regardless of which of the low setting value and the high setting value is set, the appearance of the setting suggestion is the same, so that the setting value can be hardly predicted by the appearance of the setting suggestion.

  In the second embodiment, even if any value of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect performed in the first period. Although the ratio (appearance situation) that is performed and the rate (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display during the second period are not changed, the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as a variable display effect performed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) among a plurality of setting values 1 to 6 If the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display production performed in the second period is the same, the setting values (for example, 3 to 6) other than the two setting values are changed to the second setting value. Setting suggestion between 1st period and 2nd period Ratio, which is the row (appearance situation) may not be the same.

  Further, in only one of the variable display effects produced during the first period and the variable display effects carried out during the second period, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets 1-6 as the set value. No matter which value is set, the ratio (appearance status) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect performed during the first period and the variable display effect performed during the second period The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed may not be changed.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect at a time when the predetermined effect is executed at a first number of times of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at a second number of times after the first time among the plurality of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period) , To execute the reach announcement based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode, regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the special mode is executed in the first number or the second number.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect at a time when the predetermined effect is executed at a first number of times of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at a second number of times after the first time among the plurality of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at a different ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the second time). (A portion in which the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is executed at a different rate between the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the one period)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode changes between the first number and the second number, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set, and when the first effect is different from the first set value. 2 and when the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. Regarding the production during display, the reach announcement is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variable display production performed during the second period is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, the part that executes the advance notice at a rate of 60%)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance of the reach announcement is the same regardless of which of the set values is set to 1 to 6, the set value can be hardly predicted by the appearance of the reach announcement.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set and a second set value different from the first set value. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect in the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the predetermined effect is not set. In the case where the reach notification based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is executed at a different rate in accordance with the set value, and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the setting is performed. (A portion that executes the reach announcement based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value that is set.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from being monotonous.

  In the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, it is also possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start of the variable display to the end of displaying the variable display result. For example, the first period is between the start and the end of the normal reach, the second period is between the start and the end of the super reach, the first period is between the start of the normal reach and the start of the super reach, and the second period is the normal reach. Or until the end of super-reach, or the variable pattern is simulated multiple times for one variable display by temporarily suspending the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. In the case of a pseudo continuous fluctuation pattern accompanied by pseudo continuous production that looks like a variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display, etc. , A variable display period.

  In the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the variable display effect is the same number of times, the reach is performed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The form in which the execution of the notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B) as Embodiment 3, two effects during variable display are performed during one variable display. In the case where the game can be executed twice, the execution of the reach announcement and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even in the same number of times during the variable display. May be.

  When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period and the effect during the second period, as shown in FIGS. , The setting suggestion and the reach announcement are determined at the same ratio.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8-28 and FIG. 8-29, when attention is paid to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, during the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 30% pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)}, 5% pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2% To determine pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, to determine pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to determine pattern PT-9 at a rate of 5%. Notice (high) will be decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 35%. The advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. The pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern PT is determined at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1 at the rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 40%. The advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%, and The pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%, and the pattern PT is determined at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to 48% at the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-. 4) Set to suggest (low) 低, set pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 2%; set to suggest (high)｝, and reach pattern PT-8 at 45% of reach (low) And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and a rate of 3% To determine pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, to determine pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and to determine pattern PT-9 at a rate of 5%. Notice (high) will be decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 50%. The advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. 3. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. The pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern PT is determined at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4) Set to suggest pattern (low) し, 5% pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {set to suggest (high)}, 55% pattern PT-8: reach notice (low) And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6% To determine pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, to determine pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} at a rate of 55%, and to determine pattern PT-9 at a rate of 5%. Notice (high) will be decided.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, when focusing on the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, during the first period, The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, and the pattern PT-8 at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be any one of the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%. % Of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 30% of the patterns Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and 20% at a rate of 20% Pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. It was determined to be any of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 % PT is determined as the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to 53.5% of the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and 22.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined at the rate, and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at the rate of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be any one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , 2.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)}, 40% % PT is determined as the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to 48% at the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-. 4) It is determined to be one of setting suggestion (low)｝, and is determined to be any of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and is determined to be pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be {reach announcement (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%. % Of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 45% of pattern PT-8 Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% of the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 27.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined at the rate, and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at the rate of 27.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. The pattern PT5 was determined to be any of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined to be 50% at a rate of 50%. % PT is determined as the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4) It is determined to be one of the setting suggestions (low) し, and is determined to be any of the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and the pattern PT-8 is determined to be 30%. It is determined to be {reach announcement (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the second period is determined to be any of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 % Of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 55% of pattern PT-8 Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from 1 to 6, during the first period Of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} determined as the effect type of the effect during the variable display during the variable display, and the variable display performed in the second period The ratio at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type of the medium effect is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in either the first period or the second period, the player can expect the same for the setting suggestion result.

  Further, the ratio at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display performed in the first period and the second period The pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display that is executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in either the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same manner.

  On the other hand, in the case where the effect during the variable display is executed in the first period or the second period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1), When the set value (for example, set value 6) is different, the ratio at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type is different. Since the appearance of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, in the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect performed in the second period, each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases, the effect type is changed as a pattern. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (low) High) The rate at which｝ is determined increases. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, setting suggestion is made more than when a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during the variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the same manner as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect performed during the second period is more effective as the pattern type PT-9 than the variable display effect performed during the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the effect during the variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is more easily executed, so that the player's expectation that the effect during the variable display is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be done.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27, the variable display executed in the first period is performed regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 to 6. The ratio at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting value suggestion (high)} is determined is the same between the effect and the variable display effect performed in the second period. Although the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are illustrated in the same form, the present invention is not limited thereto. Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is used for the variable display effect produced during the first period and the variable display effect produced during the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} determined It may be the ratio are different that may be different from the rate of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (Low) and reach notice (high)} is determined.

  In the third embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display during the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed during the second period, the effect is the same as the effect during variable display. Although the form in which the setting suggestion is executed by the ratio is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the effect in the second period. The setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate as the variable display production in the case of performing the variable display production. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes between the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect performed during the first period (the first variable display effect) and the variable display performed during the second period. In the case where the reach announcement is executed as the middle production (the second variable display middle production), a mode in which the reach announcement is executed at a different ratio according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect during variable display performed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period (the first variable display effect) and the effect during variable display performed in the second period When the reach announcement is performed as (the second variable display production), if the same number of variable display productions is performed, the reach announcement is performed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Run It may be. By doing in this way, if the same number of variable display effects is performed, the rate at which the reach announcement is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, it is possible to keep the player expecting that the reach announcement is executed by the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect performed in the second period.

(Sixth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following sixth invention. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value by the type of animal displayed, for example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed multiple times However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is performed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate. . Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of Means 1 of the sixth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect during variable display is one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7). That can execute a setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern) that indicates that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting mode. Specific mode (for example, setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means,
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect),
The predetermined effect of the specific mode is performed when the predetermined effect is performed at a first number of times of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is performed at a second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the variable display). (A part where the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as when performing the variable display effect in the second period later)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the specific mode regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed in the first number or the second number.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27, the variable display effect is performed when the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect in the first period and when the variable control effect is performed in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as the medium effect (65% in the example shown in FIGS. 8 to 27), the variable display effect performed during the first period and the variable display effect performed during the second period are set. The player can be similarly expected to perform the suggestion.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same ratio between when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during the variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case where the medium effect is executed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode, regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the special mode is executed in the first number or the second number.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different ratio between when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times (for example, The pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern, compared to the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period. The part that executes the reach announcement based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a high rate)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode changes between the first number and the second number, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In the third embodiment, if the non-execution can be determined, it is possible to make the execution ratio of the reach announcement different between the first period and the second period while keeping the execution ratio of the setting suggestion the same.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set, and when the first effect is different from the first set value. 2 When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, A case where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and a case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period. , Where the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance of the reach announcement is the same regardless of which of the set values is set to 1 to 6, the set value can be hardly predicted by the appearance of the reach announcement.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set and a second set value different from the first set value. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. When performing the effect during variable display, the portion that executes the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When the effect during variable display is executed, the portion that executes the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value set)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from being monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following seventh invention. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value by the type of animal displayed, for example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed multiple times However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is performed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate. . Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of Means 1 of the seventh invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player and set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect during variable display is one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7). That can execute a setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern) that indicates that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting mode. Specific mode (for example, setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means,
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started),
A plurality of times between when the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and when the second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values is set The predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at a different ratio at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display in the first period). When the setting is to be executed, the setting suggestion based on any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at a different rate according to the set value.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the appearance of the predetermined effect in the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes depending on which of the first setting value and the second setting value is set, so that the predetermined effect can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. .
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays in the first period depending on which of the values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 to 6. Since the execution ratio (appearance situation) of the setting suggestion changes between the case where the medium effect is executed and the case where the variable display medium effect is executed in the second period, the player not only has the result of the setting suggestion but also has a predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the setting value based on the appearance of the setting suggestion in.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect at a time when the predetermined effect is executed at a first number of times of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at a second number of times after the first time among the plurality of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the second effect). (In the case where the effect during variable display is executed during the period, the part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed at the same ratio)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode, regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the special mode is executed in the first number or the second number.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute the special effect at a time when the predetermined effect is executed at a first number of times of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at a second number of times after the first time among the plurality of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at a different ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, A part that can execute the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode changes between the first number and the second number, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set, and when the first effect is different from the first set value. 2 When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, A case where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value, and a case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period. , Where the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance of the reach announcement is the same regardless of which of the set values is set to 1 to 6, the set value can be hardly predicted by the appearance of the reach announcement.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set and a second set value different from the first set value. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. When performing the effect during variable display, the portion that executes the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When the effect during variable display is executed, the portion that executes the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value set)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from being monotonous.

  In Example 2 and Example 3 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the first period In each of the second period and the second period, an example of determining whether to execute the reach announcement or the setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Determines whether to execute the reach announcement or the setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and for the second period, based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value, It may be determined which one to execute, that is, which one of the first period and the second period to perform the effect based on different criteria.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 32 as the fourth embodiment, the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the first period and The effect during variable display can be executed in a second period after one period. Since the non-reach or small hit variation pattern is short in the variable display time for performing the variable display effect twice or more, in the fourth embodiment, the execution target of the variable display effect is the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. Limited to.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination processing, when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, In the second period, a process of determining the type of the effect during variable display based on the fluctuation pattern is executed. Hereinafter, the variable display effect determination processing according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 8-33, in the effect determination processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a fluctuation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area. Next, it is determined whether the specified fluctuation pattern is the normal reach or the super reach (103SGS312), and in the case of the normal reach or the super reach, the process proceeds to 103SG313, and in the case other than the normal reach or the super reach, that is, the non-reach or the small hit fluctuation pattern In this case, since the effect during the variable display is out of the target, the variable display effect determination processing ends.

  When the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach or the super reach in 103SGS312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS313). Next, based on the setting value specified by the 103SGS 313, the presence / absence of execution of the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) to be executed are determined in a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). It is determined using the normal reach and the super reach (103SGS314).

  As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in 103SGS314, effect control CPU 120 uses the variable display effect execution determination table common to variable reach and normal reach or super reach to reach notice, setting suggestion, non-execution. To be determined. More specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach announcement (low) at a rate of 40%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and sets the non-execution at 10%. Determined by percentage. In the case of the setting value 6, the execution of the reach announcement (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratios corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 are omitted here, the reach announcement is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. The setting ratio is set so that the larger the value, the higher the execution ratio of the setting suggestion and the execution ratio of the setting suggestion (high).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-35, focusing on the variable display effect type determination ratio in the first period, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period Is determined as non-execution at a rate of 20%, and determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 18%, and 40. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 15%, and 43. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%. A pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%, The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 45.5%, and the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%. A pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 10%, and 46. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3.5%. A pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined as non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50% Of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 40% To determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

  Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined whether or not the execution of the effect during variable display in the first period is determined in 103SGS314 (103SGS315). -9) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and sets a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period has been determined (103SGS317). Proceed to 103SGS318. If the execution is not determined in 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

  Next, in 103SGS318, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a normal reach (103SGS318). The presence / absence of the effect during variable display during the period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the effect is performed are determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

  As shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), in 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines any of the reach announcement, the setting suggestion, and the non-execution using the variable display during normal display effect execution determination table. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the reach announcement (low) at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and non-execution of 5%. Determined by percentage. In the case of the setting value 6, the execution of the reach announcement (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratios corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 are omitted here, the reach announcement and the setting suggestion are determined based on the common execution ratio, and the setting suggestion ( As for (high), the setting is set such that the larger the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, when paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and suggests a setting of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 at a rate of 33% ( Low)｝, determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, A pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32. At a rate of 8%, pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 2.2%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, The pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-executing at a rate of 5%, and 32% , The pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3%, and a rate of 55% To determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 30. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined as non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29% , The pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 6%, and a rate of 55% To determine the pattern PT-8 {reach announcement (low)} and the pattern PT-9 {reach announcement (high)} at a rate of 5%.

  If it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not normal reach, that is, it is super reach, whether or not to perform the variable display effect in the second period is determined based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) to be performed is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (103SGS320).

  As shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), in 103SGS320, effect control CPU 120 determines any of reach announcement, setting suggestion, and non-execution using a super-reach variable display effect execution determination table. . Specifically, in the case of the set value 1 and the set value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach announcement (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and performs the non-execution. Do not decide. Although the execution ratios corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 are omitted here, the reach announcement and the setting suggestion are determined based on the common execution ratio, and the setting suggestion ( As for (high), the setting is set such that the larger the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, when paying attention to the super-reach for the variable display notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4% The ratio is determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio is determined to be 5% for pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio of pattern PT-9 is 55%. Reach notice (high) is decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 5%. It is determined to be advance notice (low) {} and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display performed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1 at the rate of 35.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, and pattern PT5-pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach was determined at a rate of 5%. It is determined to be advance notice (low) {} and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set at 35% of the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-. 4) Setting suggestion (low) is determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 reach reach (low) is determined at a rate of 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to 33.5% of the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-1. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 was reached at a rate of 5%. It is determined to be advance notice (low) {} and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to 32% in the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-. 4 It is determined to be set suggestion (low)}, and the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {set suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 8%, and the pattern PT-8 reach reach notice (low) at a rate of 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 55%.

  Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the second period is determined in 103 SGS 319 or 103 SGS 320 (103 SGS 321). To PT-9) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and sets a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display effect in the second period has been determined (103SGS323). ), End the variable display production. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the effect during variable display ends.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when performing the effect during variable display in the first period of a plurality of times, the setting value is 1 to irrespective of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. 6 to determine whether or not to execute the setting suggestion, and to execute the effect during variable display in the second period, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and when it is super reach. A reach announcement or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate decision table. That is, since the criterion for determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during the variable display from being monotonous.

  In addition, since the setting suggestion execution ratio in the first period is higher than the setting suggestion execution ratio in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach suggestion is performed in the second period. Is easier to be executed, so that the setting suggestion is not easily executed in both the first period and the second period despite the normal reach or the super reach in the second period. Since the reach announcement is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not likely to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach announcement can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

  Since the execution ratio of the reach announcement in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the reach announcement in the first period, the display is variably displayed by executing the reach announcement in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the monotonous production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIG. 8-35 to FIG. 8-37, when paying attention to each set value, when performing the effect during variable display in the first period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, When the execution of the reach announcement is determined at the same ratio (40%) and the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the execution of the reach announcement is performed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is determined at the same ratio (60%). For this reason, in the variable display effect performed during the first period and the variable display effect performed during the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Similarly, the player can be noticed.

  Even if the set value is high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, in the second period, the reach announcement is more easily performed than the setting suggestion, and the super reach In this case, since the reach announcement (high) is easily executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation of the big hit.

  Further, even when the setting suggestion is determined to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more easily performed than when the setting suggestion is determined to be performed in the first period. Is executed, the player's expectation of the high setting can be increased.

  Also, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the reach announcement and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same rate, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, when the set value is 1, 2, 2, Since the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach announcement as the order becomes higher in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the setting suggestion is more likely to appear as the setting is higher. It is easier to predict.

  In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display (the first effect during variable display) in the first period and in the second period. In the case where the effect during variable display (the second effect during variable display) is executed, an example in which the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a different ratio is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display during the first period and the time when the effect during variable display is executed during the second period, the execution of the reach announcement may be determined at the same ratio. . In this way, the player can be similarly expected to perform the reach announcement in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 34, the execution of the reach announcement is performed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 if the same number of variable display effects are performed during the variable display. Although the form of determination is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the same number of variable display productions, the execution of the reach notice is performed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. In this manner, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(Eighth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following eighth invention. In other words, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variable display result is a big hit by changing a set value. In some cases, the probability (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) can be changed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value by the type of animal displayed, for example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed multiple times However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is performed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may be inappropriate. . Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of Means 1 of the eighth invention is:
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit” in the variation pattern setting process of S111. Based on the result of the prior determination of whether or not the variation pattern is determined by using a random value for determining the variation pattern,
Variable display means capable of performing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the variable display effect process, displays the decorative symbol based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command). Variable display), and
A predetermined effect determination unit that determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect from any of a plurality of types (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect pattern of the variable display effect is selected from among patterns PT-1 to PT-9). To determine which one) and
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the effect during variable display is based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Part that can execute setting suggestions or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9),
With
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern) that indicates that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting mode. Specific mode (for example, setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 that are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means,
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 32 as the fourth embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect). ),
Based on at least the set value that has been set, an effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in a first number out of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. A part in which the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value in the effect during variable display in the first period)
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means, an effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in a second number after the first number out of a plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment). As shown in FIG. 8-33 as part 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value and the variation pattern set in the effect during variable display in the second period. )
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the criterion for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first number and the second number, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-33, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display (the first effect during variable display) in the first period, the variable display is performed based on the variation pattern of the variable display. Determine the production type of the production * Is it not a setting value? (See 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display (the second effect during variable display) in the second period, the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The effect type of the effect during variable display is determined based on the value (see 103SGS319, 103SGS320). That is, since the criterion for determining the effect type is different between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect are different. Thus, it is suppressed that the execution of the same effect type is determined, and the effect during variable display can be suppressed from being monotonous.

A gaming machine according to an eighth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same ratio between when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times ( For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is provided. Part to be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect in the special mode, regardless of whether the predetermined effect in the special mode is executed in the first number or the second number.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different ratio between when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8 to 34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the pattern PT during the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect during the second period. -8 or a part to execute reach notice based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode changes between the first number and the second number, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means is configured to execute a predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set, and when the first effect is different from the first set value. When the second set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. When the effect during variable display is executed during the period, the portion that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 In the case where the effect during variable display is executed in two periods, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value. Minute)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the same effect can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times among a plurality of times, when a first set value among the plurality of set values is set and a second set value different from the first set value. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the predetermined effect is set). A portion for executing the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate in accordance with the set value that is present, and a portion that is set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period. The part that executes the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect in the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from being monotonous.

  In the fourth embodiment, an example is described in which, in the first period, whether to perform setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the set value regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach announcement only in accordance with the set value. You may.

  Also, in the second period, an example is described in which the execution of the reach announcement is determined prior to the setting suggestion in accordance with whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach announcement and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same ratio according to the fluctuation pattern being the normal reach or the super reach.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, an example is described in which it is determined which of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion is to be executed in accordance with the fluctuation pattern being the normal reach or the super reach. The present invention is not limited to this. In the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when the reach pattern is non-reach or small hit, either the reach announcement or the setting suggestion is executed. May be determined.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during the variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. The embodiment in which the variable display effect can be executed during the first period between the timing and the start timing of the reach reach of the normal reach and the second period after the first period has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during variable display may be executable three or more times during one variable display. In addition, the variable display is performed a plurality of times by temporarily suspending the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. May be executed at a timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative symbol in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo continuous production as shown in FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 38 as Modification Example 2, for all variation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach, and super reach, from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of reach effect of normal reach. A first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, The effect during variable display can be executed in the third period corresponding to the re-variable display period after the third period after the temporary stop of the third decorative symbol after the second period.

  In the second modification, the first period has been described as being executed before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The second period is executed in response to the re-variable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the re-variable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed in response to the re-variable display.

  In the second modification, in the variable display effect determination process described above, for the first period, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the variation pattern. The effect type of the effect during variable display is determined according to whether the variable pattern is set to, and during the second period and the third period, the variable display is performed based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. A process for determining the type of effect is performed.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern in the first period (does not determine the execution of the reach announcement). The setting ratio is set so that the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio increases as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the second period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. The setting ratio is set so that the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio increases as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the third period, the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a rate of 100% only when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach or the super reach, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. The setting ratio is set so that the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio increases as the setting value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

  In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period or the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach announcement is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach announcement in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach announcement is more easily executed than the setting suggestion as the variable display effect is repeatedly performed, as the production is repeatedly performed. Become.

  As described above, in the second modification, when performing the effect during variable display in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the When performing the effect during variable display in three periods, any one of effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the fluctuation pattern. In other words, the criterion when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect is different between the first period and the second period or the third period, so that the effect during variable display can be suppressed from being monotonous.

  Specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo continuous production is a fluctuation pattern in which the larger the number of times of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3,. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, it is highly possible that the fluctuation pattern is not super-reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach announcement, and the second re-variable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, the possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach is high, but there is also a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach announcement, and the third re-variation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, the reach pattern is executed with higher priority than the setting suggestion because the fluctuation pattern increases the possibility of super reach.

  In this way, the setting suggestion is performed while suppressing the frequent occurrence of the reach announcement and the reliability of the reach announcement being reduced in the case of a fluctuation pattern involving one or two pseudo consecutive productions. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from occurring frequently in the case of a fluctuation pattern involving three pseudo consecutive productions, thereby reducing the player's expectation of the big hit.

  Further, in the second modification, in the first period in which the jackpot reliability is lowest, the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement in accordance with the setting value in accordance with the setting value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period in which the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach announcement is set based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach or the super reach. Since the priority is determined, the player's expectation of the big hit can be appropriately increased.

  In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period. However, the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach announcement in the first period. If so, the setting suggestion may not be determined at a rate of 100%. In the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach announcement, but the execution of the reach announcement may be determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. In the third period, the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a rate of 100%. However, in the third period, the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. The execution need not be determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, in the second modification, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement in accordance with the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In the second and third periods, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the reach announcement is determined prior to the setting suggestion in accordance with the normal reach or the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Then, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement in accordance with the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In the third period, the execution of the reach announcement is performed in accordance with the normal reach or the super reach of the fluctuation pattern. May be determined prior to setting suggestion.

  Further, in the second modified example, the form in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement in accordance with the set value in the first period is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if the setting suggestion or the reach announcement is determined at least according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the reach suggestion is made according to the set value and the variation pattern. The reach notice may be determined.

  Further, in the second modified example, in the second period and the third period, the execution of the reach announcement is determined prior to the setting suggestion in accordance with the set value and the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. In the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of the plurality of times, setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If so, setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the variation pattern.

  Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect performed in the first period, the setting suggestion execution ratio is determined to be higher than the reach announcement determination ratio by making the setting suggestion execution ratio higher. Although the form in which the execution is determined with priority is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. The effect may be determined by giving priority to the execution of the setting suggestion according to the order of the process for determining the effect type.

  Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect performed in the second period, the ratio at which the execution of the reach announcement is determined is made higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the form in which the execution is determined with priority is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. The effect may be determined by giving priority to the execution of the reach announcement in accordance with the order of processing for determining the effect type.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. include.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The execution may be performed over the variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

  More specifically, the CPU 103 holds the information on the variable display (for example, the display result (including the big hit type) and the random number value for determining the variation pattern) held and suspended when the start winning is generated. By pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern based on the extracted random number value and transmitting the determination result to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 If the look-ahead notice effect that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that was the target of the look-ahead advance notice is displayed. Run a reach or set suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuations over multiple variable displays up to the start. It may be.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect at a predetermined timing. The embodiment in which the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images Z1 fall is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this. When the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image changes to the image Z2 at a timing corresponding to the operation. You may make it do.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the image Z2 to the image Z2 at the timing according to the operation by the player in the effect during the variable display as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation effective period of the push button 31B is performed. As the prompting operation prompting effect, an operation prompting image (for example, a character image “button repeated!” Or a button image) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In addition, when the specific operation of operating push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B during the effective operation period of push button 31B, effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the operation is performed, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 in response to the operation of the push button 31B (the paraglider is destroyed and dropped) can be executed, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In this case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during the variable display may be ended without performing a reach notice or setting suggestion.

  By doing so, the player who knows the specific operation can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific operation, so that the gaming interest can be improved. .

  As an operation promoting effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 where the variable display effect is executed, for example, the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promoting effect is performed by causing the light emitting unit or the like built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 to which the player pays attention, or the like, is executed. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the reach notice or the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the reach notice indicating the possibility of reaching is applied as the predetermined effect in which the effect result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the predetermined effect that results in the advantageous state suggestion result is a step in which a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the symbol being variably displayed stops, a character announcement in which the character appears, and a preview image that changes stepwise Various announcement effects can be applied as long as the announcement effect suggests the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance announcement or a group announcement in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common production period for the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, but the production mode differs between the reach announcement and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common production period). (A specific announcement that does not have a period to perform the action may be a separate effect (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, and the like). Then, even when the reach announcement and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the reach announcement may be executed prior to the setting suggestion.

  For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach announcement and the second effect image different from the first effect image and corresponding to the setting suggestion are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, for example, the display area of the first effect image is made larger than the display area of the second effect image, or the display mode such as the emission color, luminance, and contrast is changed, so that the visibility of the first effect image is improved. Is set higher than the visibility of the second effect image, the reach announcement can be executed prior to the setting suggestion.

  When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach announcement is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting is performed. When the second rendering image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the displayed image is combined with the displayed image, the first effect image is displayed so as to overlap the second effect image, so that the visibility of the first effect image is higher than the visibility of the second effect image. Thus, it is also possible to execute the reach announcement prior to the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering (making the transmissivity of the second effect image higher than the transmissivity of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the reach announcement prior to the setting suggestion.

  Further, by making the sound mode such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement corresponds to the setting suggestion. Audibility, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement, for example, in addition to increasing the volume of the sound effect, the audibility is increased by decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM. Is also good. Note that a sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement is output but a sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control of outputting effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first production sound corresponding to the reach announcement can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second production sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. When the first production sound and the second production sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first production sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel is reproduced. The audibility of the first production sound is improved by making the volume and the sound quality different from (improving) the volume and the sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel. Higher than audibility of 2 effect sound, it is also possible to execute in preference settings suggested reach notice.

  In addition, by making the light emission mode, such as the light emission color, the lighting mode, and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emission mode corresponding to the reach announcement is visually recognized by the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. That is, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach announcement may be more easily recognized than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that there is a case where the light is turned on in response to the reach notice but is turned off without turning on the light in response to the setting suggestion.

  In other words, to execute the reach announcement in preference to the setting suggestion, as described in the first to fourth embodiments and the first and second modifications, the effect result is one of the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach announcement in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the display mode of the reach announcement, sound, light, etc. is more than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority. Furthermore, executing the reach announcement prior to the setting suggestion means that the execution effect, display, and sound are set such that the effect of the reach announcement to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion to the player. , Light, operation of the movable body, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion is an example of suggesting which of the set values is 1 to 6 as the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may indicate, for example, the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (stationary).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A high base state (time saving state) in which the condition is easily satisfied, a high probability game state (high probability state) having a high probability of being a big hit gaming state, a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), a special reach state (for example, , Super reach, etc.), and the state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the big hit fluctuation pattern.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used as the gaming machine. The number of borrowed balls that are circulated inside and borrowed in response to a lending request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with a prize are added, while the number of game balls used in a game is subtracted. The present invention is also applicable to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored and stored. It should be noted that, in these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls, and thus the given points and points correspond to the game value.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

  In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. At the same time, the variation display result is derived on a variation display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which can be identified, thereby completing one game, and according to the variation display result derived on the variation display device. The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which a prize can be generated.

  Further, in the slot machine, the state advantageous to the player is a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus in which the winning probability of a small role is increased, or a state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ) And a state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified and the probability of winning the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

  Further, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in the slot machine, when a special role such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won but the combination of the symbols is not carried out, the special role is performed. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating the possibility that the corresponding symbol combination is derived and displayed, and a setting suggestion indicating the set value set in the slot machine over a plurality of games (variable display multiple times), an AT state. The game can be executed over a plurality of games (variable display of a plurality of times) until the AT state or the ART state is started after the player wins the AT state or the ART state.

1 pachinko gaming machine 5 image display device 103 ROM
120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes,
The production mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode for making a suggestion regarding a setting, and a second suggestion mode for making a suggestion regarding a setting different in type from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode,
The predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times, if both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed, The predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is higher at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is performed at a second number of times after the first number of times than when the predetermined effect is performed at a single number of times. A gaming machine capable of performing the following.

Images